Chevrolet 2005 Colorado Specifications

2005 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-11
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-32
Airbag System
......................................... 1-61
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-75
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-14
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-16
Mirrors .................................................... 2-35
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-39
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-41
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-22
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-36
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-43
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-50
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-44
Four-Wheel Drive
..................................... 5-45
Front Axle
............................................... 5-46
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-47
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-52
Tires
...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-90
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-98
Electrical System ...................................... 5-99
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-103
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
name COLORADO are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it
is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle
is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 05COLORADO A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Seats ................................................1-3
Power Seats ..................................................1-4
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-5
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ......................1-8
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) ...............1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-11
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-11
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-15
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16
Driver Position ..............................................1-16
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-24
Center Front Passenger Position .....................1-24
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-26
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults .......................................1-29
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-31
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-31
Child Restraints .............................................1-32
Older Children ..............................................1-32
Infants and Young Children ............................1-34
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Top Strap ....................................................1-42
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-43
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-46
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System (Crew Cab) ........................1-48
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System (Extended Cab with
Rear Seats) ..............................................1-48
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System (Regular/Extended Cab - No
Rear Seats) ..............................................1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ............................................1-52
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position ............................................1-54
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (Models without an Airbag
Off Switch) ...............................................1-54
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (Models with an Airbag
Off Switch) ...............................................1-57
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System ...............................................1-61
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-64
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-67
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-68
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-68
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-69
Airbag Off Switch ..........................................1-71
1-2
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-74
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-75
Restraint System Check ..................................1-75
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-76
Front Seats
Manual Seats
This section tells you about the seats – how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Move the lever located under the front of a manual seat
up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the lever. Try to move the seat with your
body to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-3
Power Seats
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a control on
the outboard side of the front seat(s).
Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat
by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering
the rear edge of the control.
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole
control toward the front or the rear of the vehicle.
Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers
the whole seat.
Vertical Control: This control reclines the seatbacks.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6 for more
information.
1-4
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, there will be a
knob located on the
outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar
support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and
lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats
for added comfort.
Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on
at low heat. Press the upper part of the switch to
turn the heater on at high heat. Put the switch in the
center position to turn the heater off.
The ignition must be on for the heated seat feature to
work. The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for
the heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
1-5
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have reclining seatbacks.
If you have power seats, you can use the vertical power
seat control to recline the seatback. Move the reclining
front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control
toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
To manually recline your seatback, lift the lever on the
outboard side of the seat.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want
it. Pull up on the lever and without pushing on the
seatback, the seat will go to an upright position.
1-6
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable head
restraints, adjust your head restraint so that the top of
the restraint is closest to the top of your head. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Push up on the head restraint to raise it. To lower
the head restraint, press the button located on top of
the seatback and push down on the head restraint.
1-7
Seatback Latches
Your vehicle may be equipped with front seatbacks that
fold forward to let people get into the rear seat or to
access the storage area behind the seat.
To fold the front seatback
forward, push the lever on
the side of the seat
rearward and pull the
seatback forward.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If
the seatback was reclined before being folded forward,
it will return to the reclined position.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)
If your vehicle is a crew cab, the rear seatback can be
folded forward. Before you can fold the rear seatback,
you need to unlatch the center safety belt buckle.
Use the following steps to lower one or both of the rear
seatbacks:
1. Insert a tool with a small tip into the slot to unlatch
the center position safety belt buckle. Then move
the belt to the side so it is not in the way.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-8
2. Grasp the loop located
on the side of the
seatback you want to
fold and pull until
you hear a click.
3. Fold the seatback down.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to fold down the other
seatback.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.
2. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate to the
buckle.
3. Make sure the seatback is locked into place by
pushing and pulling on it.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in
the upright, locked position.
1-9
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab)
To store the seat, do the following:
If your vehicle has an
extended cab, there may
be a forward folding seat in
the rear area.
To fold the rear seat down, pull down on the bottom of
the seat until the seat is in place.
The rear seat storage compartments must be in the
rearward position before folding the seat down.
1-10
1. To ensure that the safety belt buckle does not
move when not in use, secure it to the inboard
side of the seat by the hook and loop fastener (A) .
2. Push the entire seat up until it is flush with the
trim panel.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-24.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
1-11
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-12
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-13
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-14
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-15
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-34. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-16
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-17
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster to
the desired position. After
you move the adjuster to
where you want it, try to
move it down without
squeezing the release
buttons to make sure it has
locked into position.
1-23
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If
you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If
this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Center Front Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split front seat, someone can
sit in the center position.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-24
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1-25
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-26
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-31.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-27
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
1-28
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear safety belt comfort guides
for the rear outside positions.
Rear safety belt comfort guides provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for small adults. When attached to a shoulder
belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
Here is how to attach the comfort guide to the
shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
1-29
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-30
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although
you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-76.
Safety Belt Extender
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-26.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to order
it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender
will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury,
do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
1-31
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a lap-shoulder
belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the
face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in a rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have a choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-32
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a rear outside seat position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. See
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and
Small Adults on page 1-29. If the child is sitting in the
center rear seat of a crew cab, move the child toward
the safety belt buckle. In either case be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in
a crash the child’s upper body would have the
restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-33
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the
law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-34
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240-lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-37
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-38
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-39
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General
Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a
rear seat including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
1-40
Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless your vehicle has an airbag
off switch and the airbag off light shows off. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat
unless the airbag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating
airbag. Be sure to turn off the airbag before
using a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front seat position.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the airbag off switch is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the right front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position. The restraints will not work properly.
If you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front passenger’s position, the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag must be off. See Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
(Models with an Airbag Off Switch) and Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
(Regular/Extended Cab — No Rear Seats) in the Index,
and Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this
including important safety information.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
1-41
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”. It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an
adjustable head restraint, route the top strap over it.
1-42
When using a top strap-equipped child restraint in a
rear outboard seating position of a crew cab model,
route the top strap over the top of the seatback. Then,
attach it to the anchor point for that seating position.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-40 or Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-43
Crew Cab
There are top strap anchors on the back wall behind
each rear seating position. You must pull the seatback
forward to access the top strap anchors (A). See
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) in the Index.
1. Release the rear seatback from its latches (B). See
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) in the Index for
instructions.
2. Attach the top strap to the anchor (A).
Make sure that you secure the top strap to the top
strap anchor (A) and not to the seatback latch (B).
3. Push rearward on the seatback until it locks into its
upright position.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
secured properly.
Crew Cab
A. Top Strap Anchorage
B. Seatback Latch
1-44
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place
to anchor the top strap in this position.
Extended Cab with Rear Seats
There are two top strap anchorages on the center of the
back wall located behind a removable cover for the
rear seating positions. You must route the top strap
through the loop (A) at the top of the seatback to attach
the top strap to the one of the top strap anchors (B)
as shown.
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place
to anchor the top strap in this position.
Regular and Extended Cabs without
Rear Seats
Extended Cab with Rear Seats
A. Top strap routing loops
B. Top strap anchors
C. LATCH anchors (See Lower Anchorages and Top
Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.
There is a top strap anchor located behind a removable
cover on the back wall behind the right front passenger
seat. You must pull the seatback forward to access the
top strap anchors. See Seatback Latches on page 1-8.
1-45
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle is equipped with the LATCH System.
For crew cabs, there are anchors for each outboard
seating position. You will find the anchors where
the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
For extended cabs with rear seats, there are anchors
for each rear seating position. You will find the anchors
attached to the back wall near the seat cushion.
For regular cabs and extended cabs without rear seats,
there are anchors for the right front passenger
position. You will find the anchors where the seatback
meets the back of the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating the anchors, place your hand
in a palm-up position and reach up between the
seat cushion and the seatback.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
1-46
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System (Crew Cab)
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating position
you want to use. See Lower Anchorages and Top
Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. If the child restraint is forward-facing and it has a
top tether, install the top tether according to the
instructions in Top Strap Anchor Location on
page 1-43 and also refer to your child restraint
instructions to learn about the proper use of your
top tether.
4. Attach the LATCH attachments on the child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
5. Tighten the LATCH attachments and the top tether.
The child restraint instructions will show you how.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, disconnect the latch
attachments, pull the seatback forward and unhook the
top tether from the top tether anchorage. Be sure to
return the seatback to its fully upright position. See Rear
Seat Operation (Crew Cab) in the Index.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System (Extended
Cab with Rear Seats)
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use. See Lower Anchorages
and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System)
on page 1-46.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-48
3. Attach the LATCH attachments on the child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing and it has a
top tether, install the top tether according to the
instructions in Top Strap Anchor Location on
page 1-43 and also refer to your child restraint
instructions to learn about the proper use of your
top tether.
5. Tighten the LATCH attachments and top tether.
The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System (Regular/
Extended Cab - No Rear Seats)
Your vehicle has airbags. Regular cab models and
extended cab models without rear seats have an airbag
off switch on the instrument panel you can use to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. See
Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this
including important safety information.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, disconnect the latch
attachments and unhook the top tether from the top
tether anchorage.
United States
Canada
1-49
Unless the right front passenger’s frontal airbag has
been turned off, never put a rear-facing child restraint in
this vehicle. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating
airbag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
in this vehicle unless the airbag has been
turned off.
Even though the airbag off switch is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
1-50
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal
airbag could inflate even though the switch is
off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone
whom the national government has identified
as a member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 1-71.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71. If
your child restraint is forward-facing, always move
the seat as far back as it will go before securing
it in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3
or Power Seats on page 1-4. Never use a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat unless the
airbag is off.
2. Find the LATCH anchorages in the passenger seat.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.
3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. Attach the LATCH attachments on the child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
tether to the top tether anchorage if your child
restraint has one. The child restraint instructions will
show you how. You must pull the seatback
forward to access the top tether anchorage. See
Seatback Latches on page 1-8 and Top Strap
Anchor Location on page 1-43.
6. Tighten the LATCH attachments and top tether.
The child restraint instructions will show you how.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, loosen and disconnect the
LATCH attachments and loosen the top tether. Pull the
seatback forward, and unhook the top tether from the top
tether anchorage. Be sure to return the seatback to its
fully upright position. See Seatback Latches on page 1-8.
Turn on the right front passenger’s frontal airbag when
you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless
the person who will be sitting there is a member of
a passenger airbag risk group. See Airbag Off Switch
on page 1-71.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag would not
be able to inflate and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,
including important safety information.
1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-52
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock (crew cab only).
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints
will not work properly.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (Models
without an Airbag Off Switch)
Crew Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models with Rear Seats
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-42 if the child
restraint has one.
1-54
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat position, see Where
to Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, always move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing a forward-facing child
restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Power
Seats on page 1-4.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-55
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-56
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (Models
with an Airbag Off Switch)
Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models without Rear Seats
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Regular cab models and extended cab models without
rear seats have a switch on the instrument panel
that you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71
for more on this, including important safety information.
United States
Canada
1-57
Unless the right front passenger’s frontal airbag has
been turned off, never put a rear facing child restraint in
the right front passenger’s seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating
airbag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
in this vehicle unless the airbag has been
turned off.
Even though the airbag off switch is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
1-58
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal
airbag could inflate even though the switch is
off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone
whom the national government has identified
as a member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 1-71.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71. If
your child restraint is forward-facing, always move
the seat as far back as it will go before securing
it in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3
or Power Seats on page 1-4.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-59
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-60
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag when you
remove the rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle
unless the person who will be sitting there is a member
of a passenger airbag risk group. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 1-71.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag would not
be able to inflate and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,
including important safety information.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for the
driver and a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have a roof-mounted side
impact airbag for the driver and the passenger directly
behind the driver and a roof-mounted side impact airbag
for the right front passenger and the person seated
directly behind that passenger.
Airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating airbag. But these airbags
must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with
federal regulations.
1-61
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes.
CAUTION:
1-62
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
And, for some unrestrained occupants, frontal
airbags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful airbags have
provided in the past. The roof-mounted side
impact airbags are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-34.
1-63
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel which
shows the airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25
for more information.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-64
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbag for
the driver and the person seated directly behind the
driver, it is located in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-65
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbag
for the right front passenger and the person seated
directly behind that passenger, it is located in the ceiling
above the side windows.
1-66
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. If your vehicle has side
impact airbags, never secure anything to the
roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or
tiedown through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating side impact
airbag will be blocked. The path of an inflating
airbag must be kept clear.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate and a more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level
less than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your
vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or
deform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment is
about 12 to 16 mph (19.3 to 26 km/h), and the threshold
level for a full deployment is about 20 to 24 mph
(32.2 to 38.5 km/h). (The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range.)
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For
example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at
a different crash speed than if the object does
not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
1-67
If your vehicle has side impact airbags, it has electronic
side sensors. The side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. A
side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed “threshold level”.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not designed to inflate
in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not likely help the
occupant. A side impact airbag will only deploy on the
side of the vehicle that is struck.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable the
sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
sensors provide information that is used to determine
if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
1-68
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel
and in the instrument panel in front of the right front
passenger. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the
airbag modules are located in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side windows.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including frontal or near frontal collisions,
rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags. Airbags
should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s
and right front passenger’s frontal airbags, and only
in moderate to severe side collisions for side
impact airbags.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbag inflated.
Some components of the airbag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s bag or the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows — will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
1-69
Your vehicle may have a feature that will automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on and flash the
hazard warning flashers when the airbag inflates (if
battery power is available). You can lock the doors again
by using the door lock. The interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers will deactivate after approximately
15 minutes.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
1-70
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the airbag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or side impact airbag module and ceiling
covering for the roof-mounted side impact airbag.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
Airbag Off Switch
Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models without Rear Seats
If your vehicle is a regular cab model or an extended
cab model without rear seats, it has a switch on
the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
This switch should only be turned to the off position if
the person in the right front passenger’s position is
a member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
United States
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Canada
1-71
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to
12 sometimes must ride in the front because no
space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle;
or
• the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
• causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential
harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard
or windshield in a crash.
1-72
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag would not
be able to inflate and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’s
frontal airbag unless the person sitting there is
in a risk group.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
To turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the off position.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal
airbag could inflate even though the switch is
off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone
whom the national government has identified
as a member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced.
The airbag off light will come on to let you know that the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag is off. The light
will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. The right
front passenger’s frontal airbag will remain off until
you turn it back on.
1-73
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
To turn on the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the on position.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-74
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of the
vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Also, the airbag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-76
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new
retractor assembly will be there to help protect you in
a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) ...............2-9
Lockout Protection ........................................2-10
Rear Doors (Extended Cab) ...........................2-10
Tailgate .......................................................2-10
Windows ........................................................2-12
Manual Windows ..........................................2-12
Power Windows ............................................2-13
Sliding Rear Window .....................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-14
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-14
Passlock® ....................................................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-17
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-18
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-18
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-19
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-20
Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-23
Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-25
Parking Brake ..............................................2-29
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) ...2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic
Transmission) ...........................................2-32
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .....2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-33
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-33
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked
(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-34
Mirrors ...........................................................2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-35
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-36
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-38
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-38
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-39
OnStar® System .............................................2-39
Storage Areas ................................................2-41
Glove Box ...................................................2-41
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-41
Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................2-41
Assist Handles .............................................2-42
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-42
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
There is one double-sided
key for the ignition, driver’s
door lock, and tailgate.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-39
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will be able
to have new ones made easily using this number. Your
dealer should also have this number.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
If your vehicle has this feature you can lock and unlock
your doors and disarm or arm your theft-deterrent system
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the
remote keyless entry transmitter. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-14 for additional information.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
UNLOCK: Press this
button to unlock the driver’s
door and turn on the
interior lamps. The parking
lamps may also flash,
and the horn may chirp,
when this button is pressed.
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
Press the unlock button again within three seconds and
all of the doors will unlock.
LOCK: Press this button to lock all the doors. The
parking lamps may also flash and the horn may chirp
when this button is pressed. Press the button again
within three seconds and the horn may chirp.
If a door is open or ajar when the lock button is pressed,
the horn will chirp several times to let you know that
the doors did not lock and the content theft-deterrent
system is not armed. Pressing the lock button again
while the horn is chirping or within three seconds after
the horn stops sounding, the doors will lock but the
content theft-deterrent system will not arm until
the opened door is closed.
You can program different feedback modes through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). To program the
feedback modes, see “Remote Keyless Entry Feedback”
under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-36.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
L (Panic): Press this button to make the horn sound
and the headlamps and taillamps flash for up to
30 seconds. To turn them off again, do one of these
three things: wait for 30 seconds; press the panic button
again; or start the vehicle.
2-5
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery, do the following:
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a thin coin, or similar object, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing.
Gently pry the transmitter apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-6
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock the door from the outside, use the key or
the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To lock a door from the inside, push the manual lever
on your door forward. To unlock a door from the inside,
push the lever on the door rearward.
You will see a colored area on the lever when the door
is unlocked.
2-7
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has power
door locks, the switches
are located on the driver’s
and the front passenger’s
armrests.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
If your vehicle has power door locks and the remote
keyless entry system, it will be equipped with an
auto lock/unlock feature which enables you to program
your vehicle’s power door locks from the driver’s
seating position.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it will be
programmed to have all the doors lock automatically
when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P). All the
doors will unlock when the shift lever is moved back
into PARK (P).
Remove the ignition key and press L (lock) to lock all the
doors at once. To unlock all the doors, press U (unlock).
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, it will be
programmed to have all the doors lock when the vehicle
speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors
will unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.
On crew cab models, use the manual door lock lever on
each rear door to lock or unlock the doors from the
rear seating area.
To personalize the automatic door locks, see “Automatic
Door Locks” under DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-36.
2-8
Rear Door Security Locks
(Crew Cab)
If you have the crew cab model, your vehicle may be
equipped with rear door security locks. With this feature,
you can lock the rear doors so they cannot be opened
from the inside by passengers.
To use the security locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock clockwise on
the driver’s side rear door, and counterclockwise on
the passenger’s side rear door to engage the
rear door security lock.
3. Close the door.
The security lock lever is
located on the inside edge
of each rear door.
4. Repeat these steps on the opposite rear door.
If you want to open the rear door when the security lock is
on, unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
To return the rear doors to normal use, disengage the
locks by inserting the ignition key and turning the lock
counterclockwise for the driver’s side rear door, and
clockwise for the passenger’s side rear door.
2-9
Lockout Protection
Tailgate
If you have power door locks, this feature protects you
from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is
in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors
will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
Rear Doors (Extended Cab)
If you have an extended cab, your vehicle has rear
doors for convenience in loading and unloading cargo.
To open a rear door, open the front door. Then, use
the handle located on the front edge of the rear
door panel to open it. You must close the rear door
before closing the front door.
You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the handle
while pulling the tailgate down.
When you put the tailgate back up, be sure it latches
securely.
You can lock the tailgate using your ignition key. Turn
the key counterclockwise to lock the tailgate. Turn
the key clockwise to unlock the tailgate.
2-10
Removing the Tailgate
Follow these steps if you want to remove the tailgate:
To partially lower the tailgate do the following:
1. Lift up slightly on the entire tailgate assembly.
1. Lift up slightly on the entire tailgate assembly.
2. Pull upward on each
clip. Then, push
forward so the larger
part of the hole on
the bracket is over the
bolt. Pull the end
over the bolt.
Remove the retaining
cables from both ends of
the tailgate by pulling
upward on the clip. Then,
push forward so the larger
part of the hole on the
bracket is over the bolt. Pull
the end over the bolt.
Tailgate Partially Down
2. With the tailgate partially down, pull the tailgate
toward you at the passenger’s side and then
move the tailgate to the right to release the driver’s
side. You can then remove the entire tailgate
assembly.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate. Make
sure it is secure.
3. Slide the end fitting off the bottom bolt and onto the
top bolt. The tailgate will now stay in the partially
opened position.
If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracket cannot
be in the partially opened position and must be
anchored on the bottom bolt, using the secondary
position on the end fitting.
2-11
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the handle on
each door to open and close each window.
2-12
Power Windows
Press the forward edge of the control down to lower
the window.
The power window
controls are located on the
armrest of each door.
Do not hold all four power window switches down for
several seconds after the windows have been
completely lowered or raised, because the vehicle may
blow a fuse.
Express Down Windows
Crew cab switches
shown
The driver’s window also has an express-down feature
that allows the windows to be lowered without holding
the switch. Press the front edge of the switch past
the first position to activate the express-down mode. The
express-down mode can be canceled at any time by
pulling up on the switch. To open the window partway,
press the front of the switch to the first position until
the window is at the desired position.
Window Lockout
The driver’s door has switches for the passenger
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to ACC (Accessory) or ON
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-18.
Pull up the forward edge of the control with the
power window symbol on it to raise the window.
If you have a crew cab vehicle with power windows, you
will also have a window lockout button located above
the window switches. This feature disables the
passenger’s window switches when the window lockout
button is pressed. To turn the lockout feature on or
off, press the window lockout button. A red band on the
side of the button can be seen when the windows
are not locked out.
2-13
Sliding Rear Window
Visor Vanity Mirror
The passenger’s side sun visor has a mirror on it. Pull
down the visor to access the mirror.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If your vehicle has the
remote keyless entry
system, the vehicle has a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch in the
center of the window and slide the glass to open it.
When you close the window, be sure the latch is
engaged.
Sun Visors
To block glare, pull the visor down. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side
to block glare from that direction.
2-14
To activate the content theft-deterrent system, do the
following:
1. Close all the doors.
2. Lock the door with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The security light flashes.
If the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, but a door is open, the horn will chirp six
times. Close the open door and the system will be
activated.
If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turn off the
alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a
door any other way.
If a locked door is not opened using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, or by OnStar®, the alarm will go off.
The front turn signal lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for two minutes, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
Testing the Alarm
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key, the manual door lock,
or power door lock switch. The system can only
be activated using the remote keyless entry transmitter,
or by OnStar®. You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the
alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with the remote keyless entry
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by
locking the doors with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and
open the door. This should set off the alarm.
3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter or start the
engine.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the lights
flash, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse
may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, see your dealer for service.
transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will set
off the alarm.
2-15
Passlock®
®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned to ON.
See Security Light on page 3-34.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this
time. See your GM dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
2-16
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your
new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-56 for more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn to four
different positions.
ACC (ACCESSORY) (B): This is the position in which
you can operate your electrical accessories or items
plugged into the accessory power outlets. It also unlocks
the steering wheel and ignition. Use this position if
your vehicle must be pushed or towed.
ON (C): This is the position that the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the switch. The
switch stays in ON when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use ON to
operate your electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights.
LOCK (A): This position locks your ignition and
transmission on manual transmission vehicles. It is a
theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove
your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
If you have a manual transmission, the ignition switch
cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P).
START (D): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch will return to ON for normal driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you
to operate your electrical accessories, such as the
radio or items plugged into the accessory power outlets.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s
door when the ignition is in ACC or LOCK and the key
is in the ignition.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
2-17
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Manual Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) which will allow certain features of your
vehicle to continue working for up to 20 minutes after the
ignition key is turned to LOCK.
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and
start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety feature.
Your radio and power windows will work when the
ignition key is in ON or ACC. Once the key is turned
from ON to LOCK, these features will continue to work
for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2-18
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining your battery
or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
you hold the ignition key in START. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and let up on the
accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
Depending on the outside temperature, the engine
starter may continue cranking the engine up to
approximately four seconds after you release the
ignition key. This is normal.
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0°F or 18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature.
In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
2-19
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located in the engine compartment behind
the underhood fuse block on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
2-20
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on the
steering column.
It features an electronic shift position indicator within the
instrument cluster. This display must be powered
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of
PARK (P). This means that if your key is turned off,
but not in LOCK, there will be a small current drain on
your battery which could discharge your battery over
a period of time.
If you need to leave your key in the ignition but not in
LOCK for an extended period, it is recommended
that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to
prevent discharging your battery.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transmission) on page 2-30. If you are pulling
a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot
shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
as you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you want. See Shifting Out of
Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-32.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-41.
2-21
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-22
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for
off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3) when towing
a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills
or winding roads or for off-road driving.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on. You can
also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle from a
stop on slippery road surfaces.
Manual Transmission Operation
Five-Speed
This is your shift pattern.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into FIRST (1)
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Then press
the clutch pedal back down and shift into FIRST (1).
2-23
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal. After
the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R). Slowly let up
on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. If
it is hard to shift, let the shift lever return to NEUTRAL
and release the clutch pedal. Then press the clutch again
and shift into REVERSE (R). Do not attempt to shift into
the fifth gear position prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).
Your transmission has a lock out feature which prevents
a fifth gear to reverse gear shift.
2-24
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for
parking your vehicle.
Up-Shift Light
This light will show you
when to shift to the next
higher gear for best
fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the shift light when you downshift.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped with
a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when
the transfer case is in four-wheel low.
For more information, see Up-Shift Light (Manual
Transmission) on page 3-28.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of time may
cause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in four-wheel
drive on pavement for extended periods of time.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
the part that follows before using four-wheel drive. You
should use two-wheel-drive high for most normal
driving conditions.
The transfer case buttons are located to the right of the
steering wheel on the instrument panel.
Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose from the following:
2m(Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in
most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive.
2-25
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29.
4m(Four-Wheel High): This setting engages your
front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use four-wheel high
when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or
icy roads, or in most off-road situations.
4n(Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages your
front axle to give you extra traction. It sends the
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
four-wheel low if you were driving off-road in sand, mud
or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
2-26
Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in
for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
If for some reason the transfer case cannot make
a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
Shifting from Two-Wheel High to
Four-Wheel High
Press and release the four-wheel high button. This can
be done at any speed, and the front axle will lock
automatically.
Shifting from Four-Wheel High to
Two-Wheel High
Press and release the two-wheel high button. This can
be done at any speed, and the front axle will unlock
automatically.
Shifting from Two-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel High to Four-Wheel Low
To shift from two-wheel high or four-wheel high to
four-wheel low, the vehicle must be stopped or moving
less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission or the clutch pedal engaged in vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission. The preferred
method for shifting into four-wheel low is to have your
vehicle moving 1.2 mph (2 km/h). Press and release
the four-wheel low button. You must wait for the
four-wheel low indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear
or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the four-wheel low button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving faster than
1.2 mph (2 km/h), the four-wheel low indicator light will
flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case does not shift into four-wheel low, your
transmission indicator switch may require adjustment.
With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and
release the four-wheel low button. While the four-wheel
low indicator light is flashing, shift your transmission into
PARK (P). Press the four-wheel low button again. Wait
until the four-wheel low indicator light remains illuminated
before shifting your transmission into gear. Press the
four-wheel low button again to complete the shift. This will
get you into four-wheel low, but you should take your
vehicle in for service to restore normal operation.
Shifting from Four-Wheel Low to
Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High
To shift from four-wheel low to two-wheel high or
four-wheel high, your vehicle must be stopped or moving
less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal engaged. The
preferred method for shifting out of four-wheel low is to
have your vehicle moving 1.2 mph (2 km/h). Press
and release the four-wheel high button. You must wait
for the four-wheel high indicator light to stop flashing and
remain illuminated before shifting your transmission
into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the four-wheel high button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving faster than 1.2 mph
(2 km/h), the four-wheel high indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but not complete the shift.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, if your
transfer case does not shift into four-wheel high, your
transmission indicator switch may require adjustment.
With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and
release the four-wheel high button. While the four-wheel
high indicator light is flashing, shift your transmission into
PARK (P). Wait until the four-wheel high indicator light
remains illuminated before shifting your transmission into
gear. Press the four-wheel high button again to complete
the shift. This will get you into four-wheel high, but you
should take your vehicle in for service to restore normal
operation.
2-27
Shifting to NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
Use NEUTRAL when you plan to tow your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-50 for towing
instructions. To shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL do
the following:
After towing your vehicle, you will have to shift out of
NEUTRAL in order to drive. To shift out of NEUTRAL, do
the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Shift the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or press in
the clutch for vehicles with a manual transmission.
4. Shift the transfer case to two-wheel high.
5. Press and hold the two-wheel high and four-wheel
low buttons at the same time for 10 seconds. The
NEUTRAL (N) light will come on when the
transfer case shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
6. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second, or FIRST (1) for vehicles with
manual transmissions.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more
information.
2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmission in
PARK (P). Use FIRST (1) for vehicles with a
manual transmission.
3. Put an automatic transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or
press the clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
4. Press the button for the desired transfer case
position (two-wheel high, four-wheel high or
four-wheel low).
5. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
the indicator light will go out.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
6. Release the parking brake.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P), or
FIRST (1) for vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission.
7. Shift the transmission to the desired gear.
2-28
It is normal for your vehicle to exhibit a significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting in and out
of Neutral (N) and four-wheel low.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
near the driver’s door.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three
seconds. The chime will deactivate and the light will turn
off when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is
moving below 3 mph (5 km/h). See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-28.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.
2-29
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
2-30
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll — even if your shift lever is
in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) — not in
NEUTRAL.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in
PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transmission) on page 2-30.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-31
Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic
Transmission)
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P)
when the ignition is in the LOCK position. In addition, you
have to fully apply the regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-20.
Your vehicle has a manual transmission. Before you get
out of your vehicle, move the shift lever into
REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parking brake. Once
the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the ignition
key to LOCK, remove the key and release the clutch.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACC. There is no shift interlock in
this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-32
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-33
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked (Automatic
Transmission)
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-33.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-37.
2-34
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll — even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
Drive on page 2-25.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transmission) on page 2-30.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-56.
Your vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with
the OnStar® System and map lamps.
Mirrors
Mirror Operation
Manual Rearview Mirror
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the
outside rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind
your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The control at the bottom
of the mirror is the day/night feature that allows
adjustment to the mirror so that the glare of headlamps
from behind is reduced. Push the control for daytime
use; pull it for night use.
The mirror may have lamps. Press the button next to
each lamp to turn it on or off.
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Press
the tab forward (away from you) for day driving. Pull
the tab back (toward you) for night driving.
There are also three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-39 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
Map Lamps
The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the
mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, press
the button next to each lamp.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.
2-35
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
Map Lamps
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass, temperature display, and
map lamps.
Compass Operation
Mirror Operation
The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the
mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, press
the button next to each lamp.
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in the
bottom of the mirror face.
The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents
rapid changing from the day to night positions while
driving under lights and through traffic.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the current compass heading.
For example, NE is displayed for north-east.
P (On/Off):
Compass Calibration
The automatic dimming feature is
automatically activated when the vehicle is started. The
automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by
pressing this button located on the lower part of the
mirror. Press and hold the button for up to three seconds
to turn this feature on or off.
T (Indicator Light):
This light will turn on when the
automatic dimming feature is active.
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass heading, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note
pad holder or similar object. If the letter C appears in
the compass window, the compass needs calibration.
The mirror compass can be calibrated by driving
the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
The compass can be placed in calibration mode by
pressing and holding the left map light button until a C
appears on the compass display.
2-36
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, your compass
could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust the compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the left map light button until a zone
number appears on the display.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,
press the on/off button quickly until you reach
the correct zone number. Stop pressing the button
and the mirror will return to normal operation.
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
2-37
Temperature Display Operation
The outside air temperature is displayed in the window
located at the lower center of the mirror face.
Press and hold the far right button for four seconds and
release. This will change the temperature reading
between degrees Fahrenheit, degrees Celsius, or turn
the display off.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the driver’s door
armrest.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:
Outside Manual Mirrors
If the vehicle has manual outside mirrors, adjust them
by hand so that the side of the vehicle can be seen while
you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
The mirrors can be folded inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Return both
mirrors to the unfolded position before driving.
2-38
1. Move the selector switch to the L (left) or R (right)
to choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.
2. Use the arrows located on the four-way control pad
to move the mirror in the direction you want the
mirror to go.
3. Return the selector switch to the center position
once the mirrors are adjusted.
If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, the
mirror has reached the end of its travel and can go no
farther in that direction. To stop the sound, reverse
the mirror direction using the control pad.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return both mirrors to the unfolded position before
driving.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s outside rearview mirror is convex. A
convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see
more from the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
2-39
OnStar® Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can
extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is available if your hand-held cell phone is
lost, forgotten, or has a low battery. It is a hands-free
wireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in
the vehicle’s glove box or visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com; or speak with an OnStar®
advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or by calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-40
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment and more. You are also able
to listen and reply to your E-mail through your vehicle’s
audio system. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull on the lever.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have two cupholders located on the
lower part of the front doors as well as two cupholders
located at the front end of the console. Vehicles
with bench seats may have cupholders attached to the
front of the center seat.
If your vehicle is an extended cab or crew cab model,
your vehicle also has two rear cupholders. On crew cab
models, the cupholders are located at the front end
of the rear center seat cushion. On extended cab
models, the rear seat cupholders are located on top of
the rear center console.
Front Armrest Storage Area
For vehicles with bench seats, you may have a center
armrest storage area. Lift up on the upper tab located at
the front of the armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid
to open the storage area.
For vehicles with bucket seats or uplevel packages, your
vehicle may have a two-tiered center armrest storage
area. Lift up on the upper tab located at the front of the
armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid to the top storage
area. A second tab is located below the top one and
allows you to access the bottom storage area. Lift up on
the lower tab to release the latch. Then, raise the lid of
the lower storage area. The upper storage area will lift up
with the lid of the lower storage area.
To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s) until you
feel the latch close.
Once the ashtray is removed you may be able to use
the area as a cupholder.
2-41
Assist Handles
Rear Storage Area
Your vehicle may have assist handles to be used when
getting out of your vehicle. If your vehicle has assist
handles, they may be located above the front passenger
door if you have a regular cab, or above the front and
rear passenger doors if you have an extended cab
or crew cab.
If your vehicle is an extended cab model, it may be
equipped with storage compartments under the
rear seats.
If your vehicle is equipped with roof-mounted side
impact air bags, there will be assist handles located
above both the driver’s and front passenger’s doors.
To access the storage compartments you will need to
lift the cushion on the bottom of the rear seats. This will
expose the storage boxes under the seat.
2-42
Lift the lid to access the storage box.
To open a storage box, unhook the bottom of the
latches and lift the two latches on each side of the
storage box.
2-43
✍ NOTES
2-44
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ........................................3-10
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16
Exterior Cargo Lamps ....................................3-17
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-17
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
Dome Lamp .................................................3-17
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-17
Exit Lighting .................................................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-18
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-19
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Climate Control System .................................3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-22
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-23
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-24
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-24
Tachometer .................................................3-24
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-24
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-25
Airbag Off Light ............................................3-26
Battery Warning Light ....................................3-27
Up-Shift Light (Manual Transmission) ...............3-28
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-28
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-30
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-33
Security Light ...............................................3-34
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-34
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-34
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Indicator Light .....3-35
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-35
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-36
DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-36
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-39
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) .............................................3-43
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-43
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) .........................................3-43
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-44
Radio with CD ..............................................3-46
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-62
3-2
Theft-Deterrent Feature (Non-RDS Radios) .......3-73
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) .............3-73
Radio Reception ...........................................3-73
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-73
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-74
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-74
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-74
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-74
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar
3-4
The main components of your vehicle’s instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-23.
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
E. Passenger Side Airbag. See Airbag System on
page 1-61.
F. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-14. Fog Lamps (If Equipped). See Fog
Lamps on page 3-16. Exterior Cargo Lamps. See
Exterior Cargo Lamps on page 3-17.
G. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29.
H. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
I. Traction Control Button or Four-Wheel Drive Buttons.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8
and Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25.
J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-43.
K. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtrays
and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-19.
L. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
M. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-18.
N. Airbag Off Switch (Regular cab and rear seat delete
only). See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71.
O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-41.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
the instrument panel,
between the two air vents
in the center.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
3-6
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. If you have the tilt steering wheel, you
can raise it to the highest level to allow more room
for the driver to enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering
column, under the turn signal lever.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-10.
To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever
toward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level, then
release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
• J Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
on page 3-10.
page 3-11.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
3-8
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a
mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL will
also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message
off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-39 DIC Warnings and Messages
for more information.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
3-9
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
8(Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
N(Delay):
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid position
past the delay settings.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn the
band to the second solid position past the delay settings.
9(Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-10
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
QL(Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of
the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear
the window and then either stop or return to your
preset speed.
Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
Your vehicle may be equipped with cruise control.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
rT(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system (if equipped) begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
turn cruise control back on.
3-11
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-12
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold the set button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise control switch to off.
• Lightly tap or press the clutch, if you have a manual
transmission.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Exterior Lamps
AUTO: Turn the knob to this position to automatically
turn on the headlamps at normal brightness, together
with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
See Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15 for
more information.
;(Parking Lamps):
Turn the knob to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the following:
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
O(Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located to the
right of this symbol, to choose one of the four exterior
lamp positions.
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn off all
exterior lamps including the DRLs.
3-14
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2(Headlamps):
Turn the knob to this position to turn
on the headlamps, together with the previously listed
lamps and lights.
You can switch your headlamps from low to high beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
Headlamps on Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when
your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned
on and your key is out of the ignition. To turn off
the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off and then
back on. In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off
once the ignition is in LOCK.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarkers and other lamps will not
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker
lamps and the instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P) if you have an
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
automatic transmission or the parking brake is not
set if you have a manual transmission.
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
3-15
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp system so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system will only be affected when the
light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than
the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 3-17.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps, you can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp button is
located near the exterior
lamps control.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the
headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the button
again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow in the
button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
3-16
Exterior Cargo Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
You can use the cargo lamps if you need more light in
the cargo area of your vehicle or in the top-box
storage units.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel
lights and the radio display. This will only work if
the headlamps or parking lamps are on. See Exterior
Lamps on page 3-14.
Press this button, located
on the driver side of the
instrument panel near the
exterior lamp control to turn
the cargo lamps on and off.
You must have your dome
lamps on for your cargo
lamps to come on. See
Dome Lamp on page 3-17.
Interior Lamps
The thumbwheel for the interior lamps is located next to
the exterior lamps control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-14 for additional information on location.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp will come on when you open a door
and will slowly dim to off when all doors are closed.
You can also turn the dome lamp on manually by turning
the interior lamps thumbwheel all the way up. In this
position, the dome lamp will remain on whether a door
is opened or closed. See Interior Lamps on page 3-17
for additional information on location.
Dome Lamp Override
E (Dome Override):
Press this button, located below
the exterior lamp control, to turn the dome lamp off
even when a door is opened. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-14 for more information on location.
To return the lamp to automatic operation, press the
button again.
3-17
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lamps will not
come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left on for
more than 20 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK. This
will keep your battery from running down.
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets.
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located on the lower part of the instrument panel below
the climate control system and there may be one
located on the rear of the center console. A small cap
must be pulled down to access an accessory power
outlet. When not using an outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
3-18
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Your ashtray is located at the front of your center
console area. The ashtray can be removed for cleaning.
When the ashtray is removed, this area can also be
used as a cupholder.
Climate Control System
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not
use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Uplevel Climate Controls shown, Base similar
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Temperature Knob
The left knob on the control panel is used to adjust the
temperature of the air in the vehicle. Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the temperature.
3-19
Fan Knob
Mode Buttons
9 (Fan):
@ (Recirculation):
The center knob on the control panel is used
to control the fan speed. Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside air will still
enter the vehicle and will be directed according to
the position of the mode knob.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel is used to direct the
airflow inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to select
one of the following modes:
If your vehicle has air
conditioning, you will have the recirculation feature. This
mode recirculates air inside the cabin, and prevents
outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to
prevent outside odors from entering your vehicle and cool
the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this button
to turn the recirculation mode on or off. An indicator light
on the button will come on to let you know the
recirculation mode is activated.
Select this mode to direct air to the
instrument panel outlets.
Recirculation is available in the bi-level, vent and
floor (heat) modes. It should only be used while in bi-level
and vent modes. Recirculation is not available, and
the light will not come on, while in floor/defog or
defrost modes.
\(Bi-Level):
#(Air Conditioning):
H (Vent):
Select this mode to direct approximately
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and the
remaining air to the floor outlets and the defroster
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
[ (Floor):
Select this mode to direct air to the floor
outlets. Enabling recirculation in heat mode may
cause interior window fogging under some conditions. If
this occurs, see “Defogging and Defrosting” following.
3-20
Your vehicle may have air
conditioning. Press this button to turn the air-conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light on the button will
come on to let you know the air conditioning is activated.
When the system is on, this setting cools and
dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle.
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is
turned off.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
The system is designed to make adjustments to help
with fuel economy while still maintaining the selected
temperature.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to clear
fog or frost from your windshield and side windows.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog
or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost
mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. For best results, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield before defrosting.
Turn the mode knob on the climate control panel
clockwise to select the defog or defrost modes.
/(Floor/Defog):
This mode directs the air to the
windshield, the side window outlets, and to the
floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is near freezing or below. Recirculation
is not available in this mode.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, and the side window outlets. When you
select this mode, the system runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is near,
or below freezing. Recirculation is not available in
this mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheel on the outlets to change the
direction of the air flow.
Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel located in the
center of the outlet to direct the air up or down, or
slide the thumbwheel to the left or right to direct the
airflow from side-to-side.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
3-22
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a DIC that works along with
the warning lights and gages. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-36 for more information.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically.
United States automatic transmission version shown, Canada similar
3-23
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not operate the engine
with the tachometer in the shaded warning area.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip information stem.
See “Odometer” under DIC Controls and Displays
on page 3-36 for more information.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it cannot, then it is set at zero, and a label
must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
Your vehicle has a trip odometer that can tell you how
far your vehicle has been driven since you last set
the trip odometer to zero.
See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Controls and Displays
on page 3-36 for more information.
3-24
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people
to buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light
will also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will be provided.
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag systems, see Airbag System on page 1-61.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-25
Airbag Off Light
Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models without Rear Seats
When you turn the airbag off switch to the off position, the
off indictor will come on and stay on to remind you that
the airbag has been turned off. When you turn the airbag
off switch to the on position, the on indicator will come on.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,
including important safety information.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an airbag. In a crash, the frontal airbag
would not be able to inflate and help protect
the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag unless the person sitting there is
in a risk group identified by the national
government. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 1-71 for more on this, including important
safety information.
United States
Canada
3-26
Battery Warning Light
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the airbag, it means
that something may be wrong with the airbag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal
airbag could inflate even though the switch is
off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone
whom the national government has identified
as a member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced.
This light will come on
briefly when you start the
vehicle, as a check to
show you it is working;
then it should go out.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is
on could drain your battery and result in a vehicle that
may stall. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-39 for more information.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and climate control system.
3-27
Up-Shift Light (Manual
Transmission)
This light appears when
you need to shift to the
next higher gear on
a manual transmission
vehicle.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get
the best fuel economy. See “Up-Shift Light” under
Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-23 for more
information.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-28
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more information.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-50.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on briefly when you
start your engine to show it
is working. Then it will
turn off. This is normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
If the gage pointer is near the top of the gage, the
engine is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has
overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle
under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more
information.
3-30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
3-31
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
3-32
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s a
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come
on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if something goes wrong.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
isn’t flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and “OIL” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-39 for more
information.
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
3-33
Security Light
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key to START. The
light will stay on until the
engine starts.
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
If the ignition is turned on, and the light flashes, the
Passlock® system has entered a tamper mode. If
the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock® on page 2-16.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more
information.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays
on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
Highbeam On Light
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-14 for
additional information regarding the security light.
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
for more information.
3-34
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
This light turns on
whenever the Daytime
Running Lamps are on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these indicate a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 3-15 for
more information.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have remaining in the
fuel tank.
• The gage does not go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, you will see a
LOW FUEL message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-39 for more information.
3-35
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located on the instrument panel
cluster. The DIC can display information such as the trip
odometer and personalization features.
DIC Controls and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display
the information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing and releasing the trip odometer
reset stem on the DIC will acknowledge some current
warnings or service messages. Some messages will only
clear once the required action has been taken.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the DIC.
These modes are explained following. The DIC trip
odometer reset stem is located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the DIC display. To scroll through the
available functions, press and release the reset stem.
3-36
Trip Information
Odometer
The odometer is automatically displayed on the DIC
when you start the vehicle. The odometer shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip Odometer
Press and release the reset stem until TRIP appears on
the DIC display. This shows the current distance
traveled since the last reset of the trip odometer in either
miles or kilometers.
Press and hold the reset stem for approximately four
seconds to reset the trip odometer.
Engine Oil Life System
Press the reset stem until OIL LIFE RESET appears
(alternating between OIL LIFE and RESET) on the DIC
display. The engine oil life system calculates an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. The CHANGE OIL
message will alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions. Always reset the
OIL LIFE message after an oil change. To reset the
message, see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information.
Automatic Door Locks
This feature allows you to program your door locks to a
preferred setting.
To set your choice for this feature, perform the
following steps:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.
2. Press and hold the power door lock button for
approximately three seconds until the DIC
display shows the current door lock mode.
3. To view the next available mode, press and hold
the reset stem for approximately two seconds.
Release the reset stem and press and hold again to
view each mode.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display will then clear.
The following are the available modes:
Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, this mode locks all of the doors when the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) and unlocks all of
the doors when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode locks
all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks all of the doors
when the key is removed from the ignition.
Lock 2: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P) and unlocks the driver’s door
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks the driver’s door
when the key is removed from the ignition.
Lock 3: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P). The doors will not
automatically unlock.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will not automatically
unlock.
3-37
Remote Keyless Entry Feedback
The following are the available modes:
This feature allows you to program your remote keyless
entry feedback to a preferred setting.
RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes the parking lamps
when you press the lock or unlock buttons on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
To set your choice for this feature, perform the
following steps:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.
2. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
remote keyless entry transmitter at the same time.
Hold both buttons until the DIC display shows
the current remote keyless entry feedback mode.
3. To view the next available mode, press and hold
the reset stem for approximately two seconds.
Release the reset stem and press and hold again to
view each mode.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display will then clear.
3-38
RFA 2: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This mode also
flashes the parking lamps when you press the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
RFA 3: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock or unlock
buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
RFA 4: This mode disables remote keyless entry
feedback. There will be no feedback when you press
the lock or unlock buttons on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Language
DIC Warnings and Messages
This feature allows you to choose the language in which
the DIC display will show information.
Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to
correct the condition. More than one message may
appear at one time. They will appear one after the other.
The messages are displayed for three seconds each.
Some messages may not require immediate action
but you should press and release the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge that you received the message
and clear it from the display. Each message must
be acknowledged individually. Some messages cannot
be cleared from the display because they are more
urgent. These messages require action before they can
be removed from the DIC display. The following are
the possible messages that can be displayed and some
information about them.
To set your choice for this feature, perform the
following steps:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to ON.
2. Press and release the reset stem until the language
is shown on the DIC display.
3. To view the next available language, press and
hold the reset stem for approximately two seconds.
Release the reset stem and press and hold
again to view each language. You can choose from
English (default), Spanish (United States only) or
French (Canada only).
4. Once the desired language is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice.
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF
This message will be displayed when the engine coolant
temperature is too high and the air conditioning in
your vehicle needs to be turned off. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-28 and Climate Control System
on page 3-19 for more information. It will be displayed
along with the ENG HOT message.
3-39
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
CHANGE OIL
This message will be displayed if there is a problem
with your antilock brake system. Check your antilock
brake system as soon as possible and have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer. See Brakes on page 5-36
and Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-29 for more information. Press and release the
reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display.
This message will be displayed when the oil needs to
be changed. Check the oil in your vehicle as soon
as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. Press
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
BATTERY
DOORS
This message will be displayed when there is a problem
with your vehicle’s battery. See Battery on page 5-40
and Battery Warning Light on page 3-27 for more
information.
This message will be displayed on your DIC when one
or more of your doors is ajar. You should check all
the doors on your vehicle to make sure they are closed.
The message will clear from the display after all of
the doors are closed.
BRAKES
ENG (Engine) HOT
This message will be displayed if there is a problem
with your brakes. Check your brakes as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer. See Brakes on page 5-36 and Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-28 for more information.
Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
This message will be displayed when your engine coolant
temperature is hot. Check your engine coolant
temperature gage. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-30 for more information. You should
have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as
possible if you suspect your engine is overheating. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more information.
3-40
FLUID
LOW TRAC (Traction)
This message will be displayed if your brake fluid is low.
Check the brake fluid as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. See Brakes on
page 5-36 for more information. Press the reset stem
to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), you will
see this message when a low traction condition is
detected. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-8 for more information. Press and release the
reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display.
FUEL CAP
OIL
This message will be displayed if your vehicle’s fuel cap
is either off or loose. You should pull over and check to
see if your vehicle’s fuel cap is secure as soon as
possible. You may also see the check engine light on the
instrument panel cluster. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-30 for more information. Press the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from
the display.
This message will be displayed when your oil pressure
is low. See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-33 and
Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.
LOW FUEL
This message will be displayed if the level of fuel in your
vehicle is low. You should also check your fuel gage. See
Fuel Gage on page 3-35 for more information. You
should fill your vehicle’s tank as soon as possible.
OIL LIFE
This message will be displayed when you need to check
your engine oil life system. Press the reset stem to
acknowledge the message. For more information, see
“Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Controls and
Displays on page 3-36, Engine Oil on page 5-13 and
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.
3-41
PARK BRK (Brake)
TRACTION FAULT
This message will be displayed when your vehicle’s
parking brake is active. See Parking Brake on page 2-29
and Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28 for
more information. The message will clear from
the display after the parking brake is released.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), you may
see this message if there is a problem with your Traction
Control System (TCS). Check your TCS as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-8 for more information. Press the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
REDUCED POWER
This message will be displayed when your vehicle’s
engine power is reduced. Press the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
SERV (Service) 4WD (Four-Wheel Drive)
This message will be displayed when there is a problem
with your transfer case control system. Check the
transfer case on your vehicle and have it serviced by
your GM dealer. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25 for
more information about your transfer case. Press the
reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the display.
3-42
SERV VEH (Service Vehicle)
This message will be displayed if your vehicle needs
service. You should have your vehicle serviced by your
GM dealer as soon as possible.
TURN SIGNAL
This message will be displayed when your turn signal is
on for approximately 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of travel.
Press the reset stem to acknowledge the message and
clear it from the display.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to
represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the hour and minute buttons at the same time until RDS
TIME appears on the display. To accept this time, press
and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the same time,
for another two seconds. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. There is an initial two-second
delay before the clock goes into time-set mode.
Display the time with the ignition off, by pressing RCL,
HR, or MIN.
3-43
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
3-44
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear two
beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station stored
on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either SEEK arrow again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble, press and release
AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display.
Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to
increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or T
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L (balance) and
a zero or F and a zero will appear on the display.
3-45
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN
will appear on the display.
Radio with CD
Fade may not be available if the vehicle is a regular
cab model.
Radio Messages
CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-46
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to
coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
When the ignition is turned off, press this knob to display
the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The display
options are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY,
and the name of the program (if available).
3-47
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
Finding a Station
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
o TUNE p:
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you
as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if the
radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until OFF
appears on the display.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
o SCAN p: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display and
the radio will produce one beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on the display
and the radio will produce one beep. The radio will go to a
preset station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
3-48
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUDIO knob until CUSTOM
appears on the display.
3-49
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and
hold it until you hear one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
3-50
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the SEEK TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on
the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button to select and to take you to the
PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press the SEEK
TYPE button twice to display the PTY and then
to go to another station.
5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received.
3-51
The last message can be displayed by pressing the
INFO button. You can view the last message until a new
message is received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and TRAF will appear on the display. If no station
is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn
off the traffic announcements.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-52
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and
it must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption
code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signl
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-53
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Lock
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-54
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the EJT
button or the DISPL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 FLDx (Previous): This button is inactive when
playing a non-MP3 CD.
2 FLDw (Next): This button is inactive when playing a
non-MP3 CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
3-55
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM and the track number
will appear on the display when each track starts to play.
Press RDM again to turn off random play. RDM OFF
will appear on the display.
o SEEK p:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or the previous track. Press the right arrow to
go to the start of the next track. Pressing either arrow for
more than two seconds will scan the previous or next
tracks at five to eight seconds per track. SCAN and the
track number will appear on the display. Release the
button to stop searching and to play the track.
3-56
o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fast track
reverse or advance through tracks. The track number
will appear on the display for each track.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press this
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z EJT (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
Using an MP3 CD
Root Directory
MP3 Format
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kpbs,
40 kpbs, 56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs,
128 kpbs, 160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs,
and 320 kpbs or a variable bit rate. Song title,
artist name, and album will be available when recorded
using ID3 tags versions 1 and 2.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a
large number of files and folders or playlists may
cause the player to be unable to play up to the
maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
If you wish to play large numbers of files, folders,
playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file,
folder or playlist name. You can also play an MP3 CD
that was recorded using no file folders. The system can
support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the
depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback. If a CD contains more
than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum will be ignored.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files will
be located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions will have no function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the
name of the folder the radio will display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
3-57
Order of Play
File System and Naming
Tracks will be played in the following order:
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play will
begin from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, play will continue from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, play will begin again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISPL later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
3-58
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing and the CD
symbol will appear on the display. If you want to insert a
CD with the ignition off, first press the EJT button or
the DISPL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught in
the CD player.
1 FLDx (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to
go to the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this
button while in folder random mode will take you to
the previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.
2 FLDw (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the next folder. Pressing this
button while in folder random mode will take you to the
next folder and random the tracks in that folder.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. REV and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. FWD and the elapsed time of
the track will appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-59
6 RDM (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FLDR RDM will appear on the display. Once all of the
tracks in the current folder or playlist have been
played the system will move on to the next folder or
playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fast track
reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders
or playlists. The track number and file name will appear
on the display for each track. Turning this knob while
in random will fast track reverse or advance the tracks in
sequential order.
To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold this
pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep
and DISC RDM will appear on the display. This feature
will not work with playlists.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display will show only eight characters, but there
can be up to four pages of text. If there are more
than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
will take you to the next display mode.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RDM will appear on the display.
o SEEK p:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Pressing either arrow for
more than two seconds will search the previous or next
tracks at two tracks per second. Release the button
to stop searching and to play the track.
• Track mode will display the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
• Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
• Time of day mode will display the time of day and
the ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
3-60
INFO (Information): INFO will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z EJT (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-61
Radio with Six-Disc CD
INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is off, press this knob to
display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will
now be the default.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOLUME p: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
3-62
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MID, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AUTO
VOL OFF appears on the display.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
o TUNE p:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨:
Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again
to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds. PSC will
appear on the display and you will hear a double beep.
The radio will go to a preset station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again to stop
scanning presets.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
3-63
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is weak
or noisy, decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio
will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ
button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then
manually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the
AUDIO knob.
3-64
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either the
TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you
to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed, go
back to Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit
program type select mode.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and
the name of the program being broadcast.
3-65
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
3-66
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of this button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-67
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under
the CD number that is playing and the track number will
appear on the display.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six.
3-68
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for five seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
REMOVE CD # will appear on the display. The
CD will eject and can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will be
automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is pushed
back into the player, before the 25 second time period is
complete, the player will sense an error and will try to
eject the CD several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
3-69
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
©SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-70
©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. One
beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the
order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return
to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
1. Turn the CD player on.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After two
seconds of continuously pressing the SONG LIST
button, two beeps will sound to confirm the
track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, one
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
3-71
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-72
Theft-Deterrent Feature (Non-RDS
Radios)
Radio Reception
AM
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOC will appear on the display.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
FM
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS
Radios)
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear
on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-73
Care of Your CD Player
Chime Level Adjustment
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and
LOUD will appear on the radio display. To change back
to the default or normal setting, press and hold
pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change from
the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Each time the chime volume is
changed, three chimes will sound as an example of the
new volume selected. Removing the radio and not
replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly
bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
3-74
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8
Steering ........................................................4-9
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11
Passing .......................................................4-12
Loss of Control .............................................4-13
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle ....................................................4-14
Driving at Night ............................................4-28
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-29
City Driving ..................................................4-32
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-33
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-34
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-35
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-35
Winter Driving ..............................................4-37
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-41
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-42
Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-42
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-43
Truck-Camper Loading Information ..................4-49
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ..................4-49
Towing ..........................................................4-50
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-50
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-50
Trailer Connections .......................................4-55
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-55
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-56
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-11.
Drunken Driving
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
4-2
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about
0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by
drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three
mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors
like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-29.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transmission to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal.
The TCS button is located
on your instrument panel.
Press this button to
turn the TCS off and on.
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
When the traction control system is turned off, an
indicator light on the button will illuminate.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-11.
4-8
TCS operates in all transmission shift lever positions.
But the system can upshift the transmission only as high
as the shift lever position you have chosen, so you
should use the lower gears only when necessary. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-20
and/or Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-23 for
more information.
Steering
If there is a problem with TCS, TRACTION FAULT will
be displayed on your Driver Information Center
(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-39
for more information.
Steering Tips
When this warning is displayed, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,
you should always leave TCS on. But you can turn the
system off if you ever need to. You should turn the
system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or
snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See “Rocking
Your Vehicle To Get It Out” under If You Are Stuck: In
Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-41.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-9
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-11
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-12
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-13
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
Also, see Anti-Lock Brakes under Braking on page 4-5.
If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive, you
should not drive off-road unless you are on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is why
it is very important that you read this guide. You will find
many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make
your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is
there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are
the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the
local laws that apply to off-roading where you will be
driving? If you do not know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-43 and Tires
on page 5-54.
4-15
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-16
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways.
Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may
experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed
acceleration, poor traction and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-17
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-2.
4-18
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
4-19
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
4-20
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) (or shift to NEUTRAL if your vehicle
has a manual transmission) and restart the engine.
Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking
brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as
possible in REVERSE (R).
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or pressing the clutch, if you have a
manual transmission) to rev-up the engine and
regain forward momentum. This will not work. Your
vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you
could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It is best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.
4-21
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just cannot do it. What should
I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
4-22
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal pressed
down with a manual transmission. This is called
“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the
work and could overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL with the manual
transmission) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
4-23
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end
over end. But when you drive across an incline, the
much more narrow track width (the distance between
the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle
from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an
incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels. This
could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
4-24
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
4-25
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as
on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
4-26
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long
as your tailpipe is under water, you will never be
able to start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may
take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll
the vehicle over. Do not drive through
rushing water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the maintenance schedule
for additional information.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-29 for
more information on driving through water.
4-27
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
4-28
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-29
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-30
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
4-31
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-33.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-32
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
4-33
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
4-34
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-35
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on
page 4-14 for information about driving off-road.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
{CAUTION:
•
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
4-36
•
•
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-54.
4-37
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-38
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-39
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-40
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the vehicle can overheat. That
could cause an engine compartment fire or
other damage. When you are stuck, spin the
wheels as little as possible. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on
the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.
4-41
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Recovery Hooks
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If you have
a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. If you have
traction control, turn the traction control system off. See
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. Then
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and
a forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)),
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out
after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you
can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-50.
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks. The
hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle. You may
need to use them if you are stuck off-road and need to be
pulled to some place where you can continue driving.
4-42
Loading Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-43
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-54
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
There is also important information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See
“Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With the
driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door latch post. Vehicle’s without a center
pillar, extended cab models, will have the Tire and
Loading Information label attached to the driver’s side
extended cab door, above the door latch post. The
tire and loading information label shows the number of
occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-44
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-56 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety,
and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-45
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, cargo and any accessories or
equipment added to your vehicle after it left the factory
should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-46
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to
the bottom section of the center pillar, on the driver’s
side of the vehicle. Vehicles without a center pillar,
extended cab models, will have the Certification/Tire
label attached to the edge of the driver’s side, extended
cab door, below the door latch post. The label shows
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and capacity weights. Please note your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label or consult your dealer for
additional details.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-47
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on page 4-14.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
4-48
Two-Tiered Loading
By positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks across the
width of the pickup box, you can create an upper
load platform. The planks must be inserted in the pickup
box depressions. The length of the planks must allow
for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface on
each end of the plank.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the load is
securely tied down to prevent it from shifting. The
load’s center of gravity should be positioned in a zone
over the rear axle.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s taillamp
area must be properly marked according to local laws
and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you carry inside your
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy
and install the new equipment.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the rear axle.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
Your vehicle was not designed to carry a slide-in
camper.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may
consider having the pickup box removed and a
commercial or recreational body installed. However, we
recommend that conversions of this type not be done
to pickups. Owners should be aware that, as
manufactured, there are differences between a chassis
cab and a pickup with the box removed which may
affect vehicle safety. For specific information on
this pickup, contact GM Customer Assistance. See
Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
4-49
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy” (towing your vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two
wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-50
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
For manual transmission vehicles, make sure the
wheels are straight before proceeding to the
next steps. On automatic transmission vehicles, use
an adequate clamping device to ensure that the
front wheels are locked into the straight position.
{CAUTION:
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground:
1. Drive the vehicle to be towed into position behind
the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29 for more information.
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is
in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25 for more
information.
4-51
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six
weeks or more, remove the battery cable from
the negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent
your battery from draining while towing.
After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25.
Dolly Towing
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the
Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the
rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, you must tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on
the dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground)” later in this section for more information.
4-52
Use the following procedure to dolly tow your vehicle
from the front:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29 for more information.
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach
and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and
then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle. Make sure
the wheels are straight before towing.
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
{CAUTION:
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is
in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25 for more
information.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six
weeks or more, remove the battery cable from
the negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent
your battery from draining while towing.
After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29 for more information.
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
4-53
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach
and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and
then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle. Make sure
the wheels are straight before towing.
For manual transmission vehicles, make sure the
wheels are straight before proceeding to the
next steps. On automatic transmission vehicles, use
an adequate clamping device to ensure that the
front wheels are locked into the straight position.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six
weeks or more, remove the battery cable from
the negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent
your battery from draining while towing.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29 for more information.
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
4-54
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach
and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and
then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle.
For manual transmission vehicles, make sure the
wheels are straight before proceeding to the
next steps. On automatic transmission vehicles, use
an adequate clamping device to ensure that the
front wheels are locked into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six
weeks or more, remove the battery cable from
the negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent
your battery from draining while towing.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25.
Trailer Connections
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is
in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25 for more
information.
If your vehicle is equipped with trailering provisions, see
the instruction sheet in the glovebox for more information.
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch load from the CWR for your
vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached, so
that you won’t go over the GVWR or the GAWR.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-56
later in this section.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the tow vehicle.
4-55
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your
vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
4-56
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps
your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in
at the heavier loads.
• You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)
or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions). If you have a manual
transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s
better not to use the highest gear.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
The weight of the trailer tongue also affects trailering
capacity. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” next.
4-57
Vehicle*
2WD Regular Cab
Automatic Transmission,
2.8L Engine
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
3,400 lbs (1 542 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
3.42
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
3.42
1,900 lbs (862 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
3.73
2,400 lbs (1 089 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
3.42
3,300 lbs (1 497 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
3.73
3,800 lbs (1 724 kg)
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
Vehicle*
2WD Extended Cab
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
3,200 lbs (1 451 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
3.42
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
3.42
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
4-58
Vehicle*
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
3.42
3,200 lbs (1 451 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
3.73
3,700 lbs (1 678 kg)
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8L Engine
3.73
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
3.42
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
3.73
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
2WD Crew Cab
4-59
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8L Engine
3.73
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
2.8L Engine
4.10
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
4.10
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
3.73
2,100 lbs (952 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
4.10
2,100 lbs (952 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.42
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.73
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
4.10
3,400 lbs (1 542 kg)
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
4WD Regular Cab
4-60
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8L Engine
3.73
2,900 lbs (1 315 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
2.8L Engine
4.10
2,900 lbs (1 315 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
4.10
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
4.10
1,900 lbs (861 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.42
2,900 lbs (1 315 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.73
3,400 lbs (1 542 kg)
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5L Engine
4.10
3,400 lbs (1 542 kg)
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
4WD Extended Cab
4-61
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8L Engine
3.73
2,700 lbs (1 225 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
2.8L Engine
4.10
2,700 lbs (1 225 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5L Engine
4.10
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8L Engine
4.10
1,700 lbs (771 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg)
4WD Crew Cab
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
4-62
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of
your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in
it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your
vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-43 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15
percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
maximum of 500 lbs (226 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on
the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some of the items around in
the trailer.
4-63
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door
above the door latch, or see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-43. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit
for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. For
trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) you may attach the safety
chains to the attaching points on the bumper. For heavier
trailers, follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
You can use your step bumper hitch for trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) total weight, and 200 lbs (90 kg)
tongue weight.
Notice: If you use a step-bumper hitch, your
bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make
sure you have ample room when turning to avoid
contact between the trailer and the bumper.
4-64
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand
3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment.
If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and
trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets
you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
4-65
Making Turns
Driving On Grades
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked (preferably on level ground) with the
automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the manual
transmission out of gear and the parking brake applied)
for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do
get the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-28.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-66
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or
REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission. See
Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more information.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-25 for
more information.
6. Release the regular brakes.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
transmission. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn
your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
4-67
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-68
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more on this. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt,
cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-19
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-22
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-24
Engine Coolant .............................................5-25
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-27
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Cooling System ............................................5-29
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-34
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-34
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-35
Brakes ........................................................5-36
Battery ........................................................5-40
Jump Starting ...............................................5-41
Rear Axle .......................................................5-44
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-45
Front Axle ......................................................5-46
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-47
Headlamps ..................................................5-47
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps .........................................5-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-50
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-52
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-58
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-60
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-63
Buying New Tires .........................................5-64
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-66
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-66
Tire Chains ..................................................5-68
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-69
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-70
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-71
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-74
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-82
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-85
Spare Tire ...................................................5-88
Appearance Care ............................................5-90
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-90
Vinyl ...........................................................5-92
Leather .......................................................5-92
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-92
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-92
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-92
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-93
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-93
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-93
5-2
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-94
Finish Care ..................................................5-94
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-95
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-95
Tires ...........................................................5-96
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-96
Finish Damage .............................................5-96
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-96
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-96
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-97
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-98
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-98
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-98
Electrical System ............................................5-99
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-99
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-99
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-99
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-99
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-100
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-103
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-74.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-15.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A
little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at
www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
5-5
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will
operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-30. If this occurs,
return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. General Motors
recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised
to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GM
dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent
most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-30.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. If the
fuel cap is not properly installed, FUEL CAP will
appear on the DIC and the check engine light will be lit
on the instrument panel cluster. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-39 and Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 3-30 for more information.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
2. Release the secondary latch on the hood. It is
located below the front center of the hood.
To open the hood, do the following:
3. Lift the hood.
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
4. Release the hood prop from its retainer and put the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and
release it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the procedure if necessary.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.8 L engine (3.5 L engine similar), you will see the following:
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-35.
B. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25.
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine
compartment). See Power Steering Fluid on
page 5-34.
D. Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-19 and Manual
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-36.
G. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.
H. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped). See
Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-24.
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
K. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 5-29.
L. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-41.
M. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-41.
N. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-100.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area (L), then
you will need to add at least one quart of oil. But
you must use the right kind. This section explains what
kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-103.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
5-14
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
5-15
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
Engine Oil Life System
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
When to Change Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL message will come on. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-39. Change your oil
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
has GM-trained people who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL
message being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life system, do the following:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON.
2. Press and release the reset button in the DIC until
the OIL LIFE message is displayed.
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET
messages appear on the DIC display, press and hold
the reset stem until several beeps sound. This
confirms that the oil life system has been reset.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
4. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL message comes back on when you
start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on and
remove the cover.
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-14 to
determine which filter to use.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Fasten
the clips to hold the cover in place.
5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
5-19
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine
off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the
engine run at idle for five minutes if outside
temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder
than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the engine
longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold
check, you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid.
Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
At high speed for quite a while.
Checking the Fluid Level
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too little fluid could cause the
transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate
reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive
the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-20
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle has this symbol
on it.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
The transmission dipstick is located toward the rear of
the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5-21
How to Add Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
When to Check
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of automatic transmission fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transmission fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check,” earlier in
this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-22
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission
does not require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too little fluid could cause the
transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate
reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
How to Add Fluid
Here is how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
5-23
When to Check and What to Use
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding
fluid will not correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
5-24
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it is in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-25
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank
is located toward the rear
of the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level could be above the FULL COLD level.
5-26
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-29.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
5-27
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-30.
Your air conditioning may stop working if your engine is
too hot. This is normal and helps cool the engine.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
5-28
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL and let the
engine idle.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
2. Turn off the air conditioning.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while you are parked. Push down the accelerator
until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal
idle speed for at least three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Engine Cooling Fan
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
5-29
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-30
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-31
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper mixture
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap to remove it.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
5-32
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of
the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure to
secure it tightly.
5-33
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages.
So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
5-34
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located near
the front of the engine
compartment, behind the
radiator. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the proper range.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
5-35
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-36
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not have your brake
system checked to see if
there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-37
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-38
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-90.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum
brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each
time the tires are removed for rotation or changing.
When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the
rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your brakes adjust
for wear.
5-39
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change
in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for battery
location.
5-40
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-41 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page 3-73 or
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) on page 3-73.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the
parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the
jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission
in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL
before setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is
not in NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
5-41
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other
vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and
a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the terminal locations.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the batteries have enough water. You
do not need to add water to the ACDelco®
battery (or batteries) installed in your new
vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure
the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do
not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-42
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the
remote negative (−) terminal.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-43
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-44
How to Check Lubricant
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you will need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12
to determine which kind of lubricant to use.
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section apply to this vehicle.
There are two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Additional Required
Services on page 6-6.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Remove the plug and add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug
hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-45
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check your front axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add some
lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12
to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-46
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For the proper types of bulbs to use, see Replacement
Bulbs on page 5-51.
Composite Headlamp System
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer’s service department.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
5-47
To replace the bulbs, do the following:
1. Open and support the hood. See Hood Release
on page 5-11.
2. Access the bulb/sockets from the engine
compartment.
Sealed Beam Headlamps
To replace the headlamp capsule, do the following:
1. Remove the four retainer screws and the retainer.
2. Pull the headlamp capsule toward you and
unplug the electrical connector from it.
3. Remove the old headlamp capsule.
4. Plug the electrical connector into the new headlamp
capsule.
5. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the headlamp.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the headlamp housing.
4. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb.
5. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb. Use
care not to touch the new bulb with your bare hand,
anything damp or oily.
6. Place the connector with the new bulb into the
headlamp housing and turn it clockwise until it
is tight.
5-48
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
1. Remove the turn signal/parking lamp/daytime
running lamp (DRL) assembly by pressing on the
release clip on the outboard side of the housing and
pulling the outboard end of the lamp toward you.
2. Pull the inboard side of the lamp out from the small
post in the grille.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp housing.
5. Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket.
6. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp housing and
turn it clockwise until it is tight.
7. Place the inboard end of the turn signal/parking
lamp/DRL housing over the small post in the grille.
8. Align the release clip of the lamp assembly with the
square opening in the grille.
9. Push the outboard side of the lamp assembly in,
until the release clip snaps into place.
4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
5-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal
C. Back-up Lamp
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Insert the new bulb into the socket and press it in
until tight.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the housing and turn
until tight.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
5-50
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-10.
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate latch.
3. Pull out the lamp assembly.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp housing.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Headlamp
Composite High-Beam
Composite Low-Beam
Sealed-Beam
Parking/Front Turn Signal/Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL)
Parking Lamp (Inboard)
Stoplamp, Rear Turn Signal,
Taillamp, and Back-Up Lamp
Bulb Number
912
9005
9006
H6054
3757A
3157A
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it is tight.
7. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
8. Close the tailgate.
5-51
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper
Blade Check” under Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-14.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage that
occurs would not be covered by your warranty. Do
not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notched
end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
5-52
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the hook
slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
5-53
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
5-54
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-43.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger Vehicle Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature
resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-65.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-55
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa). For
more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See “Compact Spare Tire”
under Spare Tire on page 5-88 for additional information.
5-56
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 70
percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a metric
tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the
tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
5-57
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-43.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-43.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.
5-58
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-43.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-43.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-43.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-63.
5-59
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-65.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-43.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-43.
5-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-43. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also check the
tire pressure of the spare tire. If you have a compact
spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). See
Spare Tire on page 5-88 for additional information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated. Check the
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-61
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-63 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-66 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.
When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare tire
that does not match your vehicle’s road tires and
wheels, in size and type, do not include the spare in the
tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For the location of the tire
and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-43. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-103 for the
proper wheel nut torque specification.
5-62
When It Is Time for New Tires
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-70.
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your
tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-63
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the the Tire and Loading Information label. For more
information about this label and its location on your
vehicle, See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-43.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare (if you have one). It was
developed for use on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system developed
by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction
and temperature performance. (This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to
deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-65
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one
way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If
you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
5-66
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more
information.
5-67
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/75R15, P265/75R15,
P235/50R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, do not
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you or
others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and
don’t spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
5-68
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/75R15, P265/75R15, P235/50R17 or P235/50R18
use tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle.
Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear–not in NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION:
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION:
5-70
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t
move, you can put blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following as a guide
to assist you in the placement of the wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The tools you will need are located under the
passenger’s seat.
Crew Cab
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocks are
under the driver’s side rear seat.
5-71
For regular and extended
cab vehicles, the jack and
wheel blocks are located
under the cover at the
center of the vehicle
behind the front seats.
2. Turn the wing nut on the cover counterclockwise to
remove it.
For crew cab models, reach under the rear seat to
access the jack and wheel blocks. To reinstall the
jack and wheel block assembly in the mounting
bracket, insert the tabs into the jack base by pushing
the blocks up into the assembly. The outer hole in the
jack base aligns with the tab on the bracket. When
reinstalling, make sure the jack is secure, but do not
overtighten the jack in the bracket.
3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
Regular/Extended Cab
The vehicle will have a cover if it is an extended or
regular cab.
1. Move the seats forward
to access the cover.
4. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire
farthest away from the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other side, at the opposite
end of the vehicle.
5. Locate the wing nut used to retain the storage bag
and tools which is under the front passenger’s seat.
Remove it by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
5-72
A. Jack Handle
Extensions
B. Bottle Jack
C. Extension Tool
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Wheel Blocks
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D) and the jack
handle extensions (A) as shown.
2. Insert the hoist end (chiseled end) of the extension
tool (C) through the hole in the rear bumper and
into the funnel-shaped guide. The chiseled end of
the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-82.
5-73
4. Tilt the retainer when
the tire has been
lowered, and slide it up
the cable so it can
be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you will be using include the bottle jack (A),
the wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C), the
jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
5-74
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end of
the wheel wrench (E) in the slot on the wheel and
gently prying the cap out.
If your vehicle has the Xtreme package, remove
each wheel nut cap with the wheel wrench
and remove the center cap by hand.
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts
by turning it counterclockwise. Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
5-75
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-76
Front Position
3. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle as shown for
the front or rear locations.
Front Position
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle, position the
jack to the rear of the front tire in the pocket off of
the frame.
Rear Position
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack under the
rear axle and get as close as possible to the shock
absorber.
5-77
4. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the
rear axle is resting securely between the grooves
that are on the jack head.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit
under the wheel well.
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
5-78
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. Place the spare tire on the mounting surface.
9. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each wheel
nut by hand. Then use
the wheel wrench to
tighten the nuts
until the wheel is held
against the hub.
5-79
Front Position
Rear Position
10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
5-80
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-103 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-103 for the wheel nut torque specification.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown by
turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the wheel
and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel. The
cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab on
the center cap with the indentation on the wheel.
For the Xtreme, tighten each nut cap by hand, then
tighten an additional one quarter of a turn with the wheel
wrench.
5-81
Secondary Latch System
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
the following:
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off
your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare
must be installed with the valve stem pointing down. See
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-85.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end
fitting is visible.
2. If the cable end fitting is not visible, proceed to
Step 6.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
5-82
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 under Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-71.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks
on their shortest ends,
with the backs
facing each other.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the wheel.
9. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the tire.
7. Place the bottom edge of the jack on the wheel
blocks, separating them so that the jack is
balanced securely.
10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stops moving
upward and is held firmly in place, the secondary
latch has released and the tire is balancing on
the jack.
5-83
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoist end of
the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
Turn the wheel counterclockwise one turn or
until the wheel retainer assembly falls out.
12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack. Lower the
jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise.
Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides
off the jack or is hanging by the cable.
5-84
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest
of the way.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull
it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-74.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up may damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as
soon as possible.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire
carrier. Use the art and text following to help you.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
5-85
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated
across the underside of the wheel.
5-86
4. Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the funnel-shaped guide.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the tire part
way up. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel
opening and the valve stem is pointed down.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
check to make sure the tire valve stem is pointing
down, then use the wheel wrench to loosen
and then tighten the cable.
5-87
To store the tools, do the following:
A. Bottle Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
1. Return the wheel wrench, jack extensions and the
storage bag to the locations described under
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-71.
2. Reinstall the jack and wheel blocks, be sure
to install the wheel blocks first.
3. Secure the items in the vehicle as shown next.
Regular/Extended Cab
Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare
tire. Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Crew Cab
A. Bottle Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
5-88
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated.
The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds
up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and
have your full-size tire repaired or replaced where you
want. For heavy payloads or towing, and for low traction
or four-wheel-drive conditions, repair or replace the
full-size tire, and reinstall for best performance. Of
course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in
good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Full-Size Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-size spare tire,
which, when new, was fully inflated. A spare tire, whether
compact-size or full-size, may lose air over time, so check
its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-43 for information regarding proper tire inflation
and loading your vehicle. For instruction on how to
remove, install or store a spare tire, see Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-70.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Don’t mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they won’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-89
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled in
a closed space. When anything from a container is used
to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. Always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle when cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual says
you can. In many uses, these will damage the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-90
Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To
clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth. Do
not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with
the club soda water instructions given earlier in
this section.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine, and
blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water
and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking
soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
5-91
Vinyl
Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
5-92
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-97.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-97. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you
could damage your vehicle. Verify with the manager
of the car wash that your vehicle will fit before
entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
5-93
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-93.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-97.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
5-94
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
5-95
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-96
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your GM
dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this
for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery, and
convertible tops.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Usage
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
5-97
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It
is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On
this label, you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-98
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-74.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be
sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Power and Heated Seat Circuit
Breakers
There is a circuit breaker located underneath the
driver’s side front seat that controls the power and
heated seat functions.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
5-99
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
To remove the cover, push in on the tab on the end of the
cover and lift. To reinstall the cover, line up the tab and
push down on the cover until the tab clicks into place.
5-100
Fuse
Usage
1
Brake Switch, Stoplamps
2
Auxiliary Power 1
5
Air Conditioning Control Head
8
Wiper/Washer Switch
9
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
10
Ignition Transducers
11
Driver’s Side Headlamp
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
12
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
26
Back-up Lights
13
Fuel Pump
27
14
Wiper
ERLS, Map Sensor, Can Purge
Solenoid
15
Front Axle Actuator
28
Rear Turn/Hazard Lights
16
Antilock Brake System (ABS), ABS
module, Four-Wheel Drive, Gravity
Sensor
29
Driver’s Side RearTaillamp,
Passenger Side Air Bag Indicator
Lighting, Instrument Panel Dimming
Power (2WD/4WD switch lighting)
17
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
System, Sensing and Diagnostic
Module, Air Bag Off Switch
30
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) B
31
OnStar®
18
Heated Seat (If Equipped)
32
Radio
33
Auxiliary Power 2
19
Cruise Control Switch, Inside
Rearview Mirror, Transfer Case
Control Module, Brake Switch,
Clutch Disable
34
Truck Body Controller
35
Horn
20
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
36
Transfer Case Control Module
21
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
37
22
Injectors
Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/Cargo
Lamps/Mirrors
38
Cluster
23
Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch,
Neutral Safety Back-Up Switch,
Ignition Coils 1-5, Air Conditioning
Relay
39
Rear Parking Lamp 1, Passenger’s
Side Taillamp, License Plate Lamps
24
Transmission Solenoid
40
25
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driver and
Passenger’s Side Power Window
Switches Lighting
5-101
Fuse
Usage
Usage
41
Climate Control Fan
55
Horn
42
Power Windows (If Equipped)
56
43
Starter Solenoid Relay
Powertrain, Electronic Throttle
Control Fuse, Oxygen Sensor Fuse
44
Antilock Brake System 2 (ABS Pump)
57
Wipers (On/Off)
45
Antilock Brake System 1 (ABS Logic)
58
46
Power Seat Circuit Breaker/POA
Seat (If Equipped)
Retained Accessory Power (Power
Window Fuse, Wiper/Washer Switch
Fuse)
69
Fuel Canister Vent Solenoid
59
Ignition 3, Climate Control, Climate
Control Head Fuse
77
Air Conditioning Compressor
61
Run/Crank, Air Bag System Fuse,
Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,
Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse, ERLS,
Front Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse
62
Starter Relay (PCM Relay)
63
Wiper 2 (High/Low)
79
Oxygen Sensors
80
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Relays
Usage
47
Beam Selection
50
Air Conditioning Compressor
Miscellaneous
51
Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump Fuse
64
Diode — Wiper
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
65
Diode — Air Conditioning, Clutch
53
Front Parking Lamp Fuse, Rear
Parking Lamps
66
Mega Fuse
54
Headlamps
52
5-102
Relays
Usage
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
1.6 lbs
1.73 kg
Cooling System
2.8L Engine
3.5L Engine
10.4 quarts
10.6 quarts
9.8 L
10.0 L
Differential Fluid
Rear Axle
Front Axle
3.4-3.8 pints
3.2 pints
1.6-1.8 L
1.5 L
5 quarts
6 quarts
4.7 L
5.6 L
19.5 gallons
76 L
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Engine Oil with Filter
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
Fuel Tank
5-103
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
Capacities
Application
Transmission (Drain and Refill)
Automatic
Manual
English
Metric
5.0 quarts
2.5 quarts
4.7 L
2.4 L
100 ft lb
140 Y
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
5-104
Type
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.8L
8
Automatic
Manual
0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
3.5L
6
Automatic
Manual
0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Maintenance Record .....................................6-15
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
6-2
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we do not know exactly
how you will drive it. You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-43.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle on page 4-14.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL light comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and
at this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you
must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 5-16 for information on the Engine Oil
Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL light appears, certain services,
checks and inspections are required. Required services
are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that your
first service be Maintenance I, your second service be
Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and
Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL light comes on within 10 months since the vehicle
was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes †
and (j).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-54.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
Replace fuel filter.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
An Emission Control Service.
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service). See
footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
6-6
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Engine cooling system service (or
every 5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.
25,000
(41 500)
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
drum brake linings for wear or cracks. Inspect disc brake
pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect
other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,
calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake
adjustment.
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
•
•
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Visually check constant velocity joints,
rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-7
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door and fuel
door hinges, latches and locks (including glove box and
console doors), hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl and any moving seat
hardware. Lubricate hood safety lever pivot and prop rod
pivot and tailgate latch bolt, handle assembly pivot points
and hinges. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth
will make them last longer, seal better and not stick
or squeak.
6-8
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are inflated
to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check your
spare tire. See Tires on page 5-54 for further details.
Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire. If it moves,
tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, contact your GM Goodwrench
dealer for service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and
try to start the engine. The starter should work only
when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the
6-10
floor. If the starter works when the clutch is not
pushed all the way down, contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer
for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition should
turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in
PARK (P). The key should come out only in LOCK.
• With a manual transmission, the key should
come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
Usage
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering GM
No.
U.S.
89021184, in Canada
System
89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Manual
Transmission
Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part
No. U.S. 89021806, in Canada
89021807).
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only
Engine Coolant water
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25.
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No.
U.S. 12345347, in Canada
10953517) or equivalent DOT-3
brake fluid.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Engine Oil
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
6-12
Usage
Chassis
Lubrication
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Front and Rear Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
Axle
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Transfer Case
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345349, in
Canada 10953465).
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
and Universal
Joints
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Constant
U.S. 12377985, in Canada
Velocity
88901242) or lubricant meeting
Universal Joint requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
992723) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2, Category
LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinge and
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Linkage,
Folding Seats
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Part
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
2.8L Engine
3.5L Engine
Fuel Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm)
Passenger’s Side — 19 inches (48 cm)
6-14
GM Part Number
24225323
15202408
ACDelco® Part Number
—
A1624C
88984215
89017342
25121800
12569190
PF46
PF61
GF624
41-981
15169017
15169018
—
—
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ........................................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY
users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-4
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or
to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to
speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
7-6
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number.
•
•
•
•
Telephone number of your location.
Location of the vehicle.
Model, year, color, and license plate number.
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive
in frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
7-7
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $30.00 a
day and must be supported by receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You
are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of
the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five day maximum may be
available for the use of public transportation such as a
taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five day maximum
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.
7-8
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
GM dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your GM dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will
be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information has been
used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be
used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record sounds,
such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
7-11
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-12
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-75
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-99
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19
Airbag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-26
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-25
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-61
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-75
Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 1-71
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-68
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-74
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-68
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-69
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-67
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-64
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-44
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-74
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ...................................................... 3-74
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-29
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-90
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-95
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-93
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-96
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-94
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-90
Finish Care ................................................. 5-94
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-96
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-92
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-92
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-92
Leather ...................................................... 5-92
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-96
Tires .......................................................... 5-96
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-96
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-97
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-92
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-19
Assist Handles ............................................... 2-42
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-43
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-44
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-74
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
Radio with CD ............................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-73
3-74
3-74
3-46
3-62
3-43
3-43
3-73
3-73
3-74
3-15
5-19
2-20
Brake (cont.)
Parking ...................................................... 2-29
System Warning Light .................................. 3-28
Brakes .......................................................... 5-36
Braking ........................................................... 4-5
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-47
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-50
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-49
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47
Headlamps ................................................. 5-47
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-51
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-50
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-64
B
C
Battery .......................................................... 5-40
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-18
Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-27
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-34
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-103
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-10, 2-33, 4-37, 4-56
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-93
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-74
Your CDs ................................................... 3-73
2
Center Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts .......
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...........
Chains, Tire ...................................................
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ................................ 1-48,
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position ..................................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ................................... 1-54,
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Chime Level Adjustment ..................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
1-24
5-50
5-68
3-30
5-10
5-96
1-37
1-34
1-46
1-32
1-49
1-52
1-54
1-57
1-42
1-43
1-40
3-74
3-19
5-95
5-94
Cleaning (cont.)
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-90
Finish Care ................................................. 5-94
Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-92
Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-92
Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-92
Leather ...................................................... 5-92
Tires .......................................................... 5-96
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-96
Vinyl .......................................................... 5-92
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-95
Climate Control System ................................... 3-19
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-24
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-29
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-14
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-30
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-19
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-34
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-41
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
3
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-35
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-17
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-17
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Rear Doors ................................................. 2-10
4
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-36
DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-36
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-39
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-28
City ........................................................... 4-32
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-33
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-35
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-29
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-42
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-42
Winter ........................................................ 4-37
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-99
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-100
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-99
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-99
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Battery ....................................................... 5-40
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-30
Coolant ...................................................... 5-25
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-19
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-30
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-33
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-34
Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Overheating ................................................ 5-28
Starting ...................................................... 2-18
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-31
Exterior Cargo Lamps ...................................... 3-17
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-96
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-74
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-85
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-19
Manual Transmission .................................... 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-34
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-35
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-25, 5-45
Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-41
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-46
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-35
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-100
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-99
5
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-30
Fuel .......................................................... 3-35
Speedometer .............................................. 3-24
Tachometer ................................................. 3-24
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-41
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Heater ........................................................... 3-19
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-34
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-35
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-35
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-24
H
I
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamps .................................................... 5-47
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-47
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-49
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-17
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-60
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-17
Cluster ....................................................... 3-23
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-17
6
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-41
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 5-55
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-18
Dome ........................................................ 3-17
Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-17
Exterior ...................................................... 3-14
Exterior Cargo ............................................. 3-17
Fog ........................................................... 3-16
Interior ....................................................... 3-17
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-46
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ................................ 1-48, 1-49
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8
Light
Airbag Off .................................................. 3-26
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-25
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-29
Battery Warning .......................................... 3-27
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-28
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-34
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-35
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-34
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-30
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-33
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-24
Security ..................................................... 3-34
Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-28
Lighting
Exit ........................................................... 3-18
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-10
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-10
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-13
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-5
7
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-15
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-14
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-30
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-5
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Manual Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-22
Operation ................................................... 2-23
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-12
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-39
8
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-36
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-35
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-35
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-39
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-38
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-38
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-14
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-24
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-24
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-33
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-39
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle Off
Paved Roads .............................................. 4-14
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-39
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-38
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-38
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-30
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-32
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-29
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-33
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-32
Passing ......................................................... 4-12
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-16
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-18
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ......................................... 5-99
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-18
Power (cont.)
Seat ............................................................ 1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-34
Windows .................................................... 2-13
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-31
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-8
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ....................................
Radios ..........................................................
AM-FM Radio .............................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with CD ............................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
Understanding Reception ..............................
5-27
3-43
3-44
3-74
3-73
3-46
3-62
3-43
3-43
3-73
3-73
9
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-44
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-9
Rear Doors .................................................... 2-10
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-29
Rear Seat Operation ................................. 1-8, 1-10
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-26
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-42
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-36
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-35
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-35
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-42
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-50
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-51
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-75
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-76
10
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-75
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-76
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-18
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-24
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-42
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-34
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners ..............................................
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Center Front Passenger Position ....................
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ......................................
1-31
3-24
5-93
1-24
1-16
1-16
1-15
1-29
Safety Belts (cont.)
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-26
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-24
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-11
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-23
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-3
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-5
Power Seats ................................................. 1-4
Rear Seat Operation .............................. 1-8, 1-10
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-8
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-82
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-54
Designed for the LATCH System ........... 1-48, 1-49
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-52
Right Front Seat Position ...................... 1-54, 1-57
Security Light ................................................. 3-34
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-30
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-74
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......... 3-43
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 3-43
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-96
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-32
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-23
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Sliding Rear Windows ..................................... 2-14
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-88
Installing .................................................... 5-74
Removing ................................................... 5-71
Storing ....................................................... 5-85
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-103
Speedometer .................................................. 3-24
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-18
Steering .......................................................... 4-9
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
11
Storage Areas
Cupholder(s) ...............................................
Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................
Glove Box ..................................................
Rear Storage Area .......................................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-42
4-41
2-14
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-24
Tailgate ......................................................... 2-10
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-50
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-73
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-14
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-14
Passlock® ................................................... 2-16
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-95
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64
Chains ....................................................... 5-68
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70
Cleaning .................................................... 5-96
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-69
12
Tires (cont.)
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-60
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-62
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-74
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-74
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-71
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-82
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-88
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-85
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-58
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-65
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-66
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-66
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-63
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-42
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-43
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-50
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-56
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-50
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-8
Trailer
Connections ................................................ 4-55
Recommendations ....................................... 4-55
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-22
Up-Shift Light .............................................. 3-28
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-20
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-23
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-24
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-73
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-65
Up-Shift Light ................................................. 3-28
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Parking Your ............................................... 2-32
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .............................................
Service Parts Identification Label ...................
Ventilation Adjustment ......................................
Visors ...........................................................
5-98
5-98
3-21
2-14
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-22
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-39
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-66
Replacement ............................................... 5-66
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-12
Manual ...................................................... 2-12
Power ........................................................ 2-13
Sliding Rear ................................................ 2-14
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-95
13
Windshield Washer .........................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ......................................
Fuses ........................................................
Windshield Wipers .......................................
Winter Driving ................................................
14
3-10
5-35
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-74
5-52
5-99
3-10
4-37
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2